Owner's Manual

ManualsBrandsLG ManualsTelephonesKU730

USER GUIDE

KU730

This document is the user guide for the LG KU730 3G Video Mobile

Phone. All rights for this document are reserved by LG Electronics.

Copying, modifying and distributing this document without the consent

of LG Electronics are prohibited.

KU730

P/N : MMBB0212306

(

1.1

)

KU730

Summary of content (217 pages)

PAGE 1
KU730 P/N : MMBB0212306 (1.1) KU 730 KU 730 USER GUIDE This document is the user guide for the LG KU730 3G Video Mobile Phone. All rights for this document are reserved by LG Electronics. Copying, modifying and distributing this document without the consent of LG Electronics are prohibited.
PAGE 2
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪KU730‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪ LG KU730‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻝ ﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﺲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺇﻝ ﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﺲ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪٣٣‬‬ ‫‪٣٤‬‬ ‫‪٣٥‬‬ ‫‪٣٨‬‬ ‫‪٣٩‬‬ ‫‪٤٠‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫
PAGE 4
‫‪٤٥‬‬ ‫‪٤٦‬‬ ‫‪٤٨‬‬ ‫‪٤٩‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪٥١‬‬ ‫‪٥٢‬‬ ‫‪٦٤‬‬ ‫‪٦٥‬‬ ‫‪٦٦‬‬ ‫‪٦٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ‬ ‫‪٤٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪٥٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪٥٤‬‬ ‫‪٦٨‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫‪٧٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪٧٥‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪٧٧‬‬ ‫‪٧٨‬‬ ‫‪٨٠‬‬ ‫‪٨١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪٨٢‬‬ ‫‪٨٣‬‬ ‫‪٨٤‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪٨٥‬‬ ‫‪٩١‬‬
PAGE 6
‫ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪٩٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪٩٩‬‬ ‫‪١٠٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪٩٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪٩٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪٩٨‬‬ ‫‪١٠١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪١٠٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪١٠٤‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
PAGE 7
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ‪ SAR‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻮﻧﻲ )‪(ICNIPR‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻪ ‪ ٢‬ﻭﺍﺕ‪ /‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ )‪ (١٠‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ‪.
PAGE 8
‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻳﻒ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻛﺴﻮﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ( ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻐﺎﻡ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬ ‫◄ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻻﺝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪USIM‬‬ ‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ /‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‬ ‫‪) :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ( ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﻏﻠﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ( ﻳﺸﻐﻞ‪ /‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫◄ ﻭﺻﻞ ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 13
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ +‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳُﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ /‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪USIM‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﺟﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﺴﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﻱء( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ؛ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺑﻘﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻘﺪ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ (.‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺰﺍﻟﻴﺞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻬﺎﻳﻰء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴّﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺪﺕ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﺃ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ *‪microSD‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.microSD‬‬ ‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ً microSD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻏﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ " ﺗﻜﺔ"‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ microSD‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﺜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪.microSD‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،microSD‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 20
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪USIM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻊ ٍ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PIN‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻚ ‪USIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PUK2‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PUK2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪USIM‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻈﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .USIM‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻳﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ USIM‬ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺬﻛﺮﻙ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ) (‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ) (‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ /‬ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ) (‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ← ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ← ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺠﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ /‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .
PAGE 28
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ )‬ ‫( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪ .
PAGE 29
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪،T9ABC‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪ abc ،ABC ،T9abc ،T9Abc‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫؛‪.1!،:‬‬ ‫ﺏﺕﺓﺙ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺃﺇﺁﻯﺅﺉء‪3‬‬ ‫ﺱﺵﺹﺽ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺩﺫﺭﺯ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ ١-١‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ ١-٢‬ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 32
‫‪ ٢-٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٢-٦‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٢-٨‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ّ ٣-٤‬‬ ‫‪ ٣-٦‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٣-٨‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪ ١-٤‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫‪ ١-٦‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .٨‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪ ١-٨‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٤-٦‬ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ ١-٥‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٥-٦‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٦-٦‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٢-٥‬ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٣-٥‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ ١-٩‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٢-٩‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 33
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ .٠‬ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ ١-‬ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ ١-٠‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(٢-٢-١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(٣-٢-١‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(٤-٢-١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٣-١‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ً .‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٥-١‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ CPHS‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.USIM‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ – ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ .
PAGE 38
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺸﻐﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ – ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ – ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )‪ – (DN‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺸﻐﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ – ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٦-١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪.CPHS‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺑﻠﺪﻱ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺑﻠﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٨-١‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(٤-٩-١‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(٥-٩-١‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(٦-٩-١‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .
PAGE 43
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١-٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ‪ .
PAGE 44
‫)ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(USIM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٥-٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ )‪ (SDN‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣُﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٦-٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.USIM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٧-٢‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(١-٧-٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ‪ .
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١-٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺁﻟﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(١-١-٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ "ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ" ﻭ"ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ" ﻭ"ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ" ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(١-٢-٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺁﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ )‪ 2G(GSM‬ﻭ)‪3G(UMTS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ "‪("UMTS/GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ "ﺑﻼ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ"(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻣُﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻣُﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪APN‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ APN‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .
PAGE 48
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ :USIM‬ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪USIM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(٣-٤-٣‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ‪ PIN‬ﻭ‪ PIN2‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ " ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ" ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN2‬‬ ‫‪ PIN2‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪ "٢‬ﻭﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻼ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ .PIN‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN2‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ .PIN‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN2‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ PUK2‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN2‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PUK2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻮ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ .
PAGE 50
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(٥-٦-٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺘﺪﻓﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٩-٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٧-٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٨-٣‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(١-٨-٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ‪MMS‬‬ ‫)ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 52
‫◄‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ٣/٦/٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪(.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ /‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٫٠-‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪٢٫٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ "ﺁﻟﻲ" ﻭ"ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ" ﻭ"ﻏﺎﺋﻢ" ﻭ"ﺳﺎﻃﻊ" ﻭ"ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ"‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ " ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .
PAGE 54
‫◄‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١-٥‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ً ١٦٠‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٧‬ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺁﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ "ﺇﻟﻰ"‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(١-١-٥‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 56
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ(‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪) .‬ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ(‬ ‫‪ .٨‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪) .‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ(‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫‪ .٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ(‬ ‫‪ .٠‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺗُﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻠﻲ "ﺇﻟﻰ" ﻭ"ﻧﺴﺨﺔ"‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ← ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ "ﺇﻟﻰ" ﺃﻭ "ﻧﺴﺨﺔ" ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 58
‫◄‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻱ‪ :‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 60
‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤُﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ‪/‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ /‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪/‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪/‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 61
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫] ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ /‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ[‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤُﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.
PAGE 62
‫◄‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ /‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ[‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ‪ /‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ[‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ "ﺇﻟﻰ" ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٩‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 66
‫◄‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ /‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‪ :‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ /‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٥-٥‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﺮﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ /‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٧-٥‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪.
PAGE 70
‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ‪ :MMSC URL‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪ URL‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﺩ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ‪ :MMS‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪ .١‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ "ﺭﺩ"‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٨‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ .١٣‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ POP3‬ﻭ‪.IMAP4‬‬ ‫‪ .١٨‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ‪ SMTP‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺛﻴﻖ ‪ SMTP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪ SMTP‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ SMTP‬ﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ‪.SMTP‬‬ ‫‪ .١٥‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(٤-٩-٥‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(٥-٩-٥‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(٦-٩-٥‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١-٦‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٦‬־‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺼﻔﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .
PAGE 76
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﻕ ﻟـ ‪ WTLS /TLS‬ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ )‪ (WTLS/ TLS‬ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٦‬־‪٦‬־‪(٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٦-٦‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٦‬־‪٦‬־‪(١‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٦‬־‪٦‬־‪(٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٦‬־‪٦‬־‪(٧‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٦‬־‪٦‬־‪(٨‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١-٧‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Gif‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺺ ﻭﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ )ﻳﻤﻴﻦ <> ﻳﺴﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫]ﻋﺮﺽ[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫◄ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪.(DRM‬‬ ‫◄ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻛﺘﻢ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪،٠‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪،٠‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ )ﺑﻼ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.
PAGE 82
‫◄‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪.(DRM‬‬ ‫‪ .٠‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 83
‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ *.jpg‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ *.mp3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ *.3gp‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .
PAGE 84
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٧‬־‪٧‬־‪(٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ JavaTM‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ )ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١-٨‬‬ ‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٨‬־‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١-٩‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ‪ " " ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]ﻏﻔﻮﺓ[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﻔﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻔﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻨﺒﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء‬ ‫ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ← ‪ .٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ← ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫← ‪ .١‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ← ‪ .١‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫" ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ"‪ .‬ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫" ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ← ‪ .٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ← ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫← ‪ .
PAGE 88
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫◄ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ "‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫> ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ <‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ → ‪ .٧‬ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ → ‪ .١‬ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ .٢/‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .٣ /‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ → ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ → ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫→ ‪ .٤‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ‪،‬‬‫‪ (١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪ .٤‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ .٣‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ .٣‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻱ<‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ← ‪ .٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ← ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ← ‪ .١‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 91
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫◄ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ WAP‬ﻭﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺭﺑﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٩‬־‪٤‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ .#‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪ .
PAGE 93
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٩‬־‪٥‬־‪(١‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٩‬־‪٥‬־‪(٣‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺻﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺻﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﺨﻤﺲ ﻋﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻨﻴﻪ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﻟﻴﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ﺗﻢ[‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 94
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ[ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٩‬־‪٥‬־‪(٦‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ] ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ[ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٩‬־‪٥‬־‪(٧‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 95
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *‪١-‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *־‪١‬־‪(١‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ .
PAGE 96
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ *‪٣-‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *־‪٢‬־‪(٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *־‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *־‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *־‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ٍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻠﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪١‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٢‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 98
‫◄ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ #‬־‪١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻬﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻬﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺘﻪ ﺧﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .
PAGE 100
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "ﺧﻴﺎﺭ"‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ "ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑـ" ﻣﻦ "ﺧﻴﺎﺭ"‬ ‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 102
‫ﻧﺼﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ]ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻢ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪#‬־‪٧‬־‪(٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻓﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺱ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ؟‬ ‫ﺝ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺱ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ؟‬ ‫ﺝ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺱ ﻻ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫ﺝ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻯ(‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ )ﻧﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺘﺮﺍﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺱ ُ‬ ‫ﺝ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴًﺎ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺱ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ ﻻ ﻳﺮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ" ﺃﻭ "ﺻﺎﻣﺖ" ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.
PAGE 106
MEMO
PAGE 107
MEMO
PAGE 108
MEMO
PAGE 109
MEMO
PAGE 110
ENGLISH KU 730 USER GUIDE T h i s d o c u m e n t i s t h e u s e r g u i d e f o r t h e LG KU 730 3 G V i d e o Mobile Phone. All rights for this document are reserved by LG E l e c t r o n i c s . C o p y i n g , m o d i f y i n g a n d d i s t r i b u t i n g t h i s d o c u m e n t w i t h o u t t h e c o n s e n t o f LG E l e c t r o n i c s a r e prohibited.
PAGE 111
Table of Contents Ta b l e o f C o n te n ts 2 Guidelines for safe and efficient use General functions 25 6 Parts of the phone 10 Main menu 30 Getting started 13 Calls 33 Video calls Call history Call duration Call costs Call divert Call barring Fixed dial numbers Call waiting Settings 34 35 38 39 40 Address book Contacts New contact Speed dials Groups Service dial numbers Own number Settings 42 43
PAGE 112
Date & time Network Access points Security Language Memory status Handset info.
PAGE 113
Table of Contents Ta b l e o f C o n te n ts 4 Browser Home Bookmarks Saved pages Go to URL Security Settings 74 75 Media album Images Videos Sounds Applications Others Bluetooth External memory Play lists 77 78 80 81 82 83 Games & Downloads 84 My games & apps More games Downloads More 85 Alarm clock Connectivity Calculator World time Unit converter 91
PAGE 114
Screen theme Front screen theme Backlight Font Handset scheme Download more 94 95 Profiles Normal Silent Vibrate only Outdoor Headset Customised 1 Customised 2 Customised 3 96 Calendar Calendar To do Memo Secret memo Date finder Date counter Settings 98 99 100 Ta b l e o f C o n te n ts Display 101 Troubleshooting 102 Accessories 104 5
PAGE 115
Guidelines for safe and efficient use G u i d e l i n es f o r s a f e a n d e f f i c i e n t u s e Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this manual. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information This mobile phone model KU730 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves.
PAGE 116
The unit should be kept away from heat sources such as radiators or cookers. ] Never place your phone in a microwave oven as it will cause the battery to explode. ] Do not drop. ] Do not subject this unit to mechanical vibration or shock. Electronic devices ] The coating of the phone may be damaged if covered with wrap or vinyl wrapper. All mobile phones may get interference, which could affect performance. ] Do not use harsh chemicals (such as alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.
PAGE 117
Guidelines for safe and efficient use G u i d e l i n es f o r s a f e a n d e f f i c i e n t u s e ] Give full attention to driving. Blasting area ] Use a hands-free kit, if available. ] Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules.
PAGE 118
Keep the phone in a safe place out of small children's reach. It includes small parts which if detached may cause a choking hazard. Emergency calls Emergency calls may not be available under all mobile networks. Therefore, you should never depend solely on your mobile phone for emergency calls. Check with your local service provider. Battery information and care ] You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging.
PAGE 119
Parts of the phone Pa r ts o f t h e p h o n e Front view Rear view Antenna Holes for a carrying strap External camera lens Battery release latch Front screen USIM card socket Battery terminals Charger connector/ Cable connector Battery Note ] 10 Never touch the antenna during a call or when using a Bluetooth connection. It may degrade speech quality.
PAGE 120
Audio/Video player hot keys Volume keys Camera hot key Stereo headset connector : Next track/ Fast forward Pa r ts o f t h e p h o n e Right side view Left side view : Previous track/ Rewind : (Long press) Opens/Closes the play lists. Stops the play during the playback. (Short press) Plays/Pauses the music/video. Slot for external memory card Note ] Connect jack to fit the shape of terminal. Otherwise, product can be damaged.
PAGE 121
Parts of the phone Pa r ts o f t h e p h o n e Open view Speaker Internal camera lens OK key + 4-way navigation key Main screen Left soft key Activates the prompts displayed on screen in the left soft box. Right soft key Activates the prompts displayed on screen in the right soft box. Clear key/Handsfree key Long press during a call activates or deactivates handsfree.
PAGE 122
Getting started G ett i n g s ta r te d Installing the USIM card and battery 1. Install the USIM card. Your USIM card contains your phone number, service details and contacts and must be inserted into your handset. If your USIM card is removed then your handset becomes unusable (except emergency calls) until a valid USIM is inserted. Always disconnect the charger and other accessories from your handset before inserting and removing your USIM card. Slide the USIM card into the USIM card holder.
PAGE 123
Getting started 2. Install the battery. G ett i n g s ta r te d 14 Insert the battery aligning the gold contacts on the battery with the battery terminals (gold contacts) in the battery compartment. Then push down the top of the battery until it snaps into space. 3. To remove the battery Turn the power off. (If power is left on, there is a chance you could lose the stored telephone numbers and messages.) Press the battery release latches 1 and lift the battery 2. Then remove the battery.
PAGE 124
To connect the travel adapter to the phone, you must first install the battery. 2. Connect the other end of the travel adapter to the mains socket. Use only the charger included in the box. 1. With the arrow facing you as shown in the diagram push the plug on the battery adapter into the socket on the center of the phone until it clicks into place. G ett i n g s ta r te d Charging the battery Warning! ] Do not force the connector as this may damage the phone and/or the travel adapter.
PAGE 125
Getting started G ett i n g s ta r te d Disconnecting the charger Disconnect the travel adapter from the phone by pressing its side buttons as shown in the diagram. Note ] Ensure the battery is fully charged before using the phone. ] Do not remove your battery or the USIM card while charging. ] The moving bars of the battery icon will stop after charging is complete. ] If the battery is completely discharged, the charge could take some minutes before starting.
PAGE 126
3. Insert the memory card in the slot. The gold contacts must be kept on the back of the microSD. Don’t push the microSD too much. If it cannot enter easily in the slot, you may be trying to insert it in the wrong way or there could be a foreign object in the slot. G ett i n g s ta r te d How to use a microSD* memory card 1. Power off the phone.
PAGE 127
Getting started G ett i n g s ta r te d 4. Once inserted, push the memory card until you hear a “click”, meaning that the microSD has been correctly blocked. ] The card is designed to fit easily into the system one way only. ] Do not bend the card or force it into the slot. ] Do not insert any other kind of memory cards different from microSD. For more information on the microSD, please refer to the instructions manual of the memory card. Memory card formatting 5. Close the slot plastic protection.
PAGE 128
PIN code (4 to 8 digits) Ensure that your USIM card is in your handset and the battery is charged. Press and hold the key until power is on. Enter the USIM PIN code that was supplied with your USIM card if PIN code setting is on. After a few seconds you will be registered on the network. The PIN (Personal Identification Number) code protects your USIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN code is usually supplied with the USIM card.
PAGE 129
Getting started G ett i n g s ta r te d PUK2 code (4 to 8 digits) Screen structure The PUK2 code, supplied with some USIM cards, is required to unlock a blocked PIN2 code. If you lose the code, contact your network operator’s customer service. If there is no USIM card installed, an animation telling you to insert a USIM card appears. If the USIM card inserted into the phone is invalid, an animation telling you that the USIM card is locked appears.
PAGE 130
! Icon indicator bar @ Short-cut menu bar ! In idle mode, you can access the following menus. G ett i n g s ta r te d Shows what operations are taking place and reminds you of battery and signal strength. This appears through all activities.
PAGE 131
Getting started Key functions G ett i n g s ta r te d The functions of the keys in the idle screen status are described below. Left soft key Connects to Music. Direction key ( ) Selects the short-cut menu bar. Video call key (Call register: in idle mode) Recent calls Direction key ( ) Short-cut for address book search Send key Recent calls 1key Long: Voice mail 2 key Long: Video mail * key Long : Switches to manner mode 22 Right soft key Opens the Messaging menu.
PAGE 132
Handset lock screen The numbering screen appears when a number key is pressed in the idle screen. When the Handset Lock function is selected, you can only make an emergency call, release the lock, and turn off the phone in this screen. As always, you can turn the phone off by pressing and holding the End key for a few seconds. Screen structure The numbering screen consists of status indicators, dialled number, and soft menu. Status indicators are the same as that of the idle screen.
PAGE 133
Getting started Unlock function G ett i n g s ta r te d 24 If you press the OK key, a popup screen appears asking you to input the Security code to unlock the phone. The Security code is configured by selecting Settings > Security > Change codes. If you key in an incorrect Security code, the phone will remain in Handset Lock status. If you key in the correct Security code, the phone will be unlocked, and the idle screen will be displayed.
PAGE 134
General functions Note ] Making and answering a video call You can make a video call in 3G covered service area. If called user has a 3G video phone in 3G covered service area, the call will be established. You can also answer a video call for video incoming call. To make / answer a video call, do the following. 1. Input the phone number using the keypad, or select the phone number from the calls made/ received lists.
PAGE 135
General functions G e n e ra l f u n c t i o n s Making a voice/video call from Contacts It is easy to call anyone whose number you have stored in your Contacts. Press the down navigation key to access the contacts list. Scroll to your chosen contact. Press the key to make a voice call, or key to make a video call. Press the key to finish the call. Making international calls 1. Press and hold the key for the international prefix. The ‘+’ character can be replaced with the international access code. 2.
PAGE 136
ABC mode If you are inside a building, being near a window may give you better reception. You can see the strength of your signal by the signal indicator see the strength ( ) on your handset's display screen. This mode lets you enter letters by pressing the key labeled with the required letter once, twice, three times or more until the letter is displayed. Entering text You can enter alphanumeric characters using the keypad.
PAGE 137
General functions G e n e ra l f u n c t i o n s added, the word changes to reflect the most likely candidate from the dictionary. 3. Complete each word with a space by pressing the key. 1. When you are in the T9 predictive text input mode, start entering a word by pressing keys to . Press one key per letter. To delete letters, press the key. Press and hold down the key to erase entire words. ] ] The word changes as letters are typed. Ignore what’s on the screen until the word is typed completely.
PAGE 138
Characters in the order display Lower case Upper case Using the 123 (Number) mode .,?!’”1- ()@/ :_ .,?!’”1- ()@/ :_ abc2àáâãäåæç A B C 2 À Á Â Ã Ä Å ÆÇ def3èéêë DEF3ÈÉÊË The 123 Mode enables you to enter numbers in a text message (a telephone number, for example). Press the keys corresponding to the required digits before manually switching back to the appropriate text entry mode.
PAGE 139
Main menu M a i n m e nu You can launch a menu by pressing the to go into the sub menu. From main menu you can also go into a submenu by directly pressing the corresponding numeric key as follows. The main menu consists of the following top menus and sub menus. 1. Calls 30 key in the idle screen. Move to a desired item and press the OK key 2. Address book 3. Settings 1.1 Video calls 2.1 Contacts 3.1 Date & time 1.2 Call history 2.2 New contact 3.2 Network 1.3 Call duration 2.3 Speed dials 3.
PAGE 140
6. Browser 8. Games & Downloads 4.1 Video camera 6.1 Home 8.1 My games & apps 4.2 Camera 6.2 Bookmarks 8.2 More games 4.3 Voice recorder 6.3 Saved pages 8.3 Downloads M a i n m e nu 4. Media 6.4 Go to URL 5. Messaging 5.1 New message 6.5 Security 6.6 Settings 5.2 Inbox 9. More 9.1 Alarm clock 9.2 Connectivity 7. Media album 9.3 Calculator 5.4 Drafts 7.1 Images 9.4 World time 5.5 Outbox 7.2 Videos 9.5 Unit converter 5.6 Sent items 7.3 Sounds 5.7 Templates 7.4 Applications 5.
PAGE 141
Main menu M a i n m e nu . Display 0. Profiles #. Calendar .1 Screen theme 0.1 Normal #.1 Calendar .2 Front screen theme 0.2 Silent #.2 To do .3 Backlight 0.3 Vibrate only #.3 Memo .4 Font 0.4 Outdoor #.4 Secret memo .5 Handset scheme 0.5 Headset #.5 Date finder .6 Download more 0.6 Customised 1 #.6 Date counter 0.7 Customised 2 #.7 Settings 0.8 Customised 3 Multi tasking feature KU730 supports multi-tasking feature. You can use multiple applications at the same time.
PAGE 142
Calls Menu 1.1 You can set the screen display when making / receiving a video call. ] ] ] ] My picture size: Select my picture size to be displayed. Menu 1.2 You can view missed, received, dialled and entire call records. Each call record menu provides the following functions. ] My picture position: Select the position where your picture will be displayed. You can make a voice or video call to the number in the call record. ] Hide my picture: Determine whether to display my picture or not.
PAGE 143
Calls Calls Received calls (Menu 1.2.2) Last call (Menu 1.3.1) Allows you to view received call records, make a call, send a message, and save the number in the Contacts. Shows the latest call time in units of hour/minute /second. Received calls (Menu 1.3.2) Dialled calls (Menu 1.2.3) Shows incoming call time. Allows you to view dialled call records, make a call, send a message, and save the number in the Contacts. All calls (Menu 1.2.4) Menu 1.3 You can view call time by types.
PAGE 144
Call divert Menu 1.5 Call divert menus for voice and video calls are provided. However, available menus are determined by the USIM supporting CPHS. The menu consists of Voice calls, Video calls and Deactivate all. Voice calls All voice calls 1. When the off menu is selected – Deletes Call Divert Number registered to the network. While waiting for the result from the network, Requesting message and animation appears. When the network answers, the result of the operation is displayed. 2.
PAGE 145
Calls Calls 5. After activating All voice calls menu, selecting the Options menu at the bottom of the menus displays the Activate, Deactivate, Deactivate all, View status and clear list menus. Activate: Move to Settings menu to activate call divert. The View status menu shows the settings on the network. If you select this menu, Requesting. message and animation appear. Then the network settings are displayed when the information is received from the network.
PAGE 146
If busy 1. When the off menu is selected – It operates the same to All voice calls menu. 2. To other number is selected – It operates the same to All voice calls menu. 3. When input dial number (DN) is selected – It operates the same to All voice calls menu. 4. When Options menu is selected – It activates and operates If busy menu. It operates the same to All voice calls menu. If no answer 1. When the off menu is selected – It operates the same as All voice calls menu. Calls menu, Requesting..
PAGE 147
Calls Calls Call barring Menu 1.6 Call barring menus for Voice and Video calls are provided. However, available menus are determined by the USIM supporting CPHS. The menu consists of Voice calls, Video calls and Deactivate all. The Voice calls and Video calls menus have the following submenus. The Call barring menu consists of All outgoing, Outgoing international, Outgoing international calls except home country, All incoming and Incoming when abroad submenus.
PAGE 148
Outgoing international 1. When OK button is selected – It operates the same to Outgoing calls menu. 2. When Options menu is selected – It activates and operates International calls menu. It operates the same to Outgoing calls menu. Outgoing international calls except home country 1. When OK button is selected – It operates the same to Outgoing calls menu. 2. When Options menu is selected – It activates and operates International except home country menu. It operates the same to Outgoing calls menu.
PAGE 149
Calls Calls Call waiting ] ] ] Menu 1.8 Activate: Activates waiting service. Selecting this item, displays requesting message and animation. When the network answers, the result of the operation is displayed. Deactivate: Deactivates Call waiting service. Selecting this item displays requesting message and animation. When the network answers, the result of the operation is displayed. View status: Displays activated Call waiting service group item of the network.
PAGE 150
Allows you to set the answering method. You can choose between pressing the send key, opening the flip, and pressing any key. Calls Answer mode (Menu 1.9.4) Minute reminder (Menu 1.9.5) Determines whether to sound a 1 minute tone every 1 minute when you are on the phone. BT answer mode (Menu 1.9.6) ] Hands-free: You can answer a call using the Bluetooth headset, when the Bluetooth is connected. ] Handset: If you press the Send key on the handset to answer a call, you can talk on the handset.
PAGE 151
Address book Ad d res s b o o k This is an address book function to record and manage contact addresses. Using the Contacts management menu, you can register new contact addresses, or can search for desired addresses by name, phone number, or groups. Contacts Menu 2.1 Performs the contact address search function. The search operation is performed based on a name as a default. The current search method and results found are displayed in the Search window.
PAGE 152
(USIM dependent) Menu 2.5 You can view the list of Service Dialling Numbers (SDN) assigned by your service provider (if supported by the USIM card). Such numbers include the emergency, directory enquiries and voice mail numbers. After selecting a service number, press the send key. Own number Menu 2.6 Allows you to display your phone number in the USIM card. Settings Menu 2.7 Display data (Menu 2.7.1) Determines where address book data is stored.
PAGE 153
Settings S ett i n g s Date & time Menu 3.1 Although the current time is automatically configured when the phone is registered to the network, users can configure time and date directly using this menu. The time configured by user is valid only while the phone is turned on. Time (Menu 3.1.1) 1. Select ‘Date’ item from the Date & Time list, and then press [OK]. 2. Input 'Day', 'Month' and 'Year' using the number keys. 3. Select date format using Left and Right navigation keys. 1.
PAGE 154
Menu 3.2 Preferred list (Menu 3.2.3) Select between Automatic and Manual. If the network is searching automatically, you can add a preferable network to be connected to. And the following options are available. ] Automatic: Automatically searches for the network and registers the handset to the network. This is recommended for best service and quality. ] ] Manual: All the currently 2G(GSM) and 3G(UMTS) available networks are shown and you can select one of them for registration.
PAGE 155
Settings S ett i n g s You can edit the following configuration items by selecting the right soft key. ] Connection title Access Point profile name. Bearer Choose the bearer from the list. (Default is “UMTS/GPRS”) Authentication Choose the authentication from the list. (Default is “No auth”) When this is set to On, you are requested to enter your PIN each time you switch the phone on. Note User name Information provided by service provider. Password Information provided by service provider.
PAGE 156
If USIM changed: Locks the handset when the phone's USIM card has been changed. Immediate: Locks the handset immediately. You are requested to the security code to confirm the selection. ] To unlock the handset, you need to enter the security code. Change codes (Menu 3.4.3) You can change PIN, PIN2, the mobile phone password and the call barring password. PIN code PIN is the abbreviation of Personal Identification Number, and is used to restrict the use of an unauthenticated user.
PAGE 157
Settings PIN2 code S ett i n g s Memory status PIN2 is the abbreviation of Personal Identification Number 2, and is used to restrict the use of unauthenticated users like PIN. The PIN2 code change procedure is the same as the one for the PIN code. 3 incorrect PIN2 code entries would invalidate the PIN2 code. In this case, you have to input the PUK2 code in order to use the PIN2 code again. The maximum allowed number of attempts of PUK2 code input is 10 times, like PUK1.
PAGE 158
Streaming settings Select this to format the external memory. If you want to set different network setting to play streaming content, you can set different network settings. Handset info. Menu 3.7 Menu 3.9 S ett i n g s Format external memory (Menu 3.6.5) This functions shows the USIM card telephone number, model name and software version of the mobile phone. Reset settings Menu 3.8 Clear memory (Menu 3.8.1) Select this to clear the memory. You are requested to enter the security code.
PAGE 159
Media Media Video camera Menu 4.1 This application enables you to record a video clip. You can play and watch a saved video file in this menu. Once recorded, a video clip can be sent by a picture message, group message, Email or Bluetooth. 1. Press the left soft key [Options] to set the desired environment as follows. 50 ] Quality: You can select the desired quality of video by selecting either Super fine, Fine or Normal. ] Zoom: You can select the zoom level.
PAGE 160
Note ] You can easily switch the video camera and camera using the left/right navigation keys in preview mode. Camera Quality: You can select the desired quality of photo from super fine, fine or normal. ] Multishot: You can take 3/6/9 photos consecutively. (The available number of multishots depends on the size.) ] Zoom: You can select the zoom level. ] Brightness: You can select a level from -2.0 to 2.0 with step size 0.5. The higher the level, the more brighter screen.
PAGE 161
Media Media ] Memory: Select the desired memory between Handset and External. ] Mirror: You can activate the mirror effect by selecting "On". ] Switch camera: You can switch the camera to activate between Internal one and External one. After finishing all the settings, press the right soft key [Close]. 2. Focus the camera on where you want to capture and press the OK key [Take]. 3. You can save the photo by pressing the OK key. It is saved in the Images of Media album.
PAGE 162
] Sound theme: You can set it as a voice ringtune, video ringtune, message tone, or switch on/off sound. ] My stuff: Shows the voice files. Media 2. Pressing the OK key starts recording. When a recording is started, the recording time is displayed on the LCD. To cancel the recording, press the right soft key. 3. When you finish the recording, press the OK key to exit. The recorded file is automatically saved in the Voice recorder folder in Media album (Media album - Sounds - Voice recorder). 4.
PAGE 163
Messaging M es s a g i n g New message Menu 5.1 Text message (Menu 5.1.1) You can write and edit a single text message up to 160 characters. You can write and edit up to 7 concatenated messages. 8. Press the right soft key [Send] to send the message. And it will be saved in the Sent items automatically. If the message has not been sent, it will stay in the Outbox with fail status. Option menus in To field 1. Press the Menu key in idle mode and select Messaging.
PAGE 164
4. Emoticon: To add an emoticon. #. Cc/Title: Select this to insert Cc or title. Note ] In Text Message, if you insert a new slide, an image, a sound, a video clip, CC or title, the screen is changed to Picture message screen. ] Send message: Select this to send the created message. ] Save to drafts: Saves the message to drafts. ] Dictionary: Select the desired dictionary mode. 8. Sound: You can insert a sound file. (One sound per slide) ] Add to dictionary: You can add a word in the dictionary.
PAGE 165
Messaging M es s a g i n g 4. Enter phone numbers in the To and Cc fields. Select Options > Contacts or press OK in the TO or CC fields to select a phone number from the Contacts. 6. Image: You can insert an image. (One image per slide) 5. Enter the title of the message in the Title field. 8. Sound: You can insert a sound file. (One sound per slide) 6. Enter your message in the Message field. 7. Select Insert. 1. New slide: Select this to add a new slide. 2. Symbol: You can insert diverse symbols.
PAGE 166
< Option Menus > Insert: You can insert the followings. 9. New image: Camera module opens and you can take a photo. The taken image is inserted in the message window. (One image per slide) 1. New slide: Select this to add a new slide. 2. Symbol: You can insert diverse symbols. After entering the corresponding number keys, press the OK key. 0. New video: Video camera module opens and you can record a video. The recorded video is inserted in the message. (One video clip per slide) 3.
PAGE 167
Messaging M es s a g i n g ] Remove: Select this menu to remove the current slide or an object included in the current slide. ] Move to Slide: Select this menu to move to the previous or the next slide. ] Dictionary: Select the desired dictionary mode. ] Add to dictionary: You can add a word in the dictionary. ] Cancel: Cancels the message writing and goes back to New message menu. Note ] 58 You can send a picture message straight from your camera, camcorder or sound recorder. 1.
PAGE 168
] ] Forward: Forwards the selected message. ] Call: Call back to the originator. ] Save address: Saves the sender’s number to the address book. ] New message: Displays the Edit screen where you can create a new message. ] 2. Press up, down or OK [Pause] key to pause playback of the message, and press the OK [Play] key to resume playing the message. Use: Displays a screen (Get number/e-mail address/web address screen) that shows the number/e-mail address/web address included in the message.
PAGE 169
Messaging M es s a g i n g ] Forward: Forwards the selected message. [Outbox / Detailed View Screen Menus] ] Call: Call back to the originator. ] Resend: Resends the message. ] Save address: Saves the sender’s number to the address book. ] Edit: Edits the selected message. ] Play/Pause: Plays the message or pauses message playback. ] New message: Displays the Edit screen in which you can create a new message.
PAGE 170
[Outbox / Play Screen Menus] ] ] Resend: Resends the message. ] Move to slide: Move to the selected Slide. ] Edit: Edits the selected message. ] ] Play/Pause: Plays the message or pauses message playback. View detail: Displays the Detailed View screen. Itshows you detailed information of messages. [Sent / Detailed View Screen Menus] ] Forward: Forwards the selected message. ] ] Save address: Saves the recipient’s number to the address book. ] Edit: Edits the selected message.
PAGE 171
Messaging M es s a g i n g ] View objects: Displays the screen (Object View Screen) in which you can view the audio, image, and video files included in the message. ] View objects: Displays the screen (Object View Screen) in which you can view the audio, image, and video files included in the message. You can also save those files in different names to the specified location.
PAGE 172
Create e-mail You can create a new e-mail (Electronic mail). 1. Select E-mail from New message, and press the OK key. 2. You can edit the items necessary to create an e-mail message by using the cursor. 7. To enter data in the recipient (To), reference address (CC) and hidden reference address (BCC) fields, you can search the Contacts by using the Contacts key and use the following functions by using the [Option] key. ] Add contacts: Select this menu to insert the name saved in Contacts.
PAGE 173
Messaging M es s a g i n g ] Save to drafts: Select this menu to save the message in the draftbox. ] View object: Show the attached file. ] Remove: Remove the attached file. ] Cancel: Exit the e-mail composer. 9. You can enter the message contents by moving the cursor to the Message field. Use the following functions by using the [Option] key. 64 ] Remove: Remove the attached file. ] Cancel: Exit the e-mail composer. 10.
PAGE 174
] ] Reply all: Creates a reply to all the recipients. ] New message: You can write a new message. ] ] Mark/Unmark: You can select one or more messages for multiple deletion. Forward: Forwards the selected e-mail message to another e-mail address. ] Open: Opens selected e-mail. ] Filter: Displays messages by desired message types. ] Retrieve: Retrieves new e-mail messages. ] New message: Creates new message. ] Delete: Deletes the current message. ] Mark/Unmark: Use mark/unmark option.
PAGE 175
Messaging M es s a g i n g ] Reply: Creates a reply to the selected e-mail message. ] Reply all: Creates a reply to all the recipients. ] Forward: Forwards the selected e-mail message to another e-mail address. ] Restore: Restores a deleted e-mail. ] Delete: Deletes an e-mail permanently. ] Save address: Save or update the address of sender. ] Mark/Unmark: uses mark/unmark option. ] New message: Write a new Text message, Picture message, Group message or Email. ] 5.
PAGE 176
] View status: Shows the reason for transmission failure. ] Outbox is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Mark/Unmark: You can select one or more messages for multiple deletion. ] 1. Select a message and then press the OK key to view the message. Filter: Displays messages by desired message types. ] Delete: Deletes the current message. ] Message info.: You can check the message type, date and time and where it's saved. Outbox Menu 5.5 2.
PAGE 177
Messaging M es s a g i n g ] Save address: Saves the recipient's number to the address book. Settings ] Mark/Unmark: You can select one or more messages for multiple deletion. Text message (Menu 5.9.1) ] Filter: Displays messages by desired message types. • Input the address of Text message centre. ] Delete: Deletes the current message. ] Message info.: Shows the detailed information of the message. Templates Menu 5.7 You can save frequently-used phrases in the input window in advance.
PAGE 178
Request report: Determines whether to request a delivery confirmation mail for a Multimedia message. ] Allow report: Determines whether to allow sending a delivery confirmation mail for a delivery confirmation mail request. 2. Read reply: Allows you to determine whether to request a read confirmation mail to a recipient, and whether to allow sending read confirmation mail to a sender. 5. Validity period: Allows you to configure the term of validity for a message when transmitting a picture message.
PAGE 179
Messaging M es s a g i n g the contents of the profile in the edit mode by pressing the Edit key. The edit screen also appears when creating a new profile under Options. The meanings of the items are given below. ] Title: Profile name. ] MMSC URL: Enter the picture message centre URL. ] MMS Proxy: Enter the WAP gateway port number. ] Connection mode: Specify the UDP(CO/CL), the TCP with proxy, the TCP without proxy. ] Access points: Specify the access point name (see WAP connection settings.
PAGE 180
5. Email accounts 2. You can edit a selected e-mail account by pressing the Edit key. 7. Move the cursor to the Reply e-mail address field and configure the e-mail address to reply to your email. 3. You can select an e-mail account to be used to send an e-mail using the OK key. 8. Move the cursor to the Outgoing mail server field and configure the outgoing e-mail server. 4. You can select the following functions using the Option key. 9.
PAGE 181
Messaging M es s a g i n g 13. Move the cursor to the Mailbox type and select the email inbox type. You can select one between POP3 and IMAP4. 14. Move the cursor to Save to server and determine whether to leave a copy of messages on the incoming server or not. You can select On or Off using the List key. 15. Move the cursor to the Save sent mail into field and select where to save the sent mails. 16. Move the cursor to the Access point field to select an access point to connect to the Internet.
PAGE 182
You can add or modify the video mail centre. Voice mail (Menu 5.9.5) M es s a g i n g Video mail (Menu 5.9.4) You can add or modify voice mail centre. Service message (Menu 5.9.6) You can configure service message receipt option. ] Never: Your phone will not receive any service message. ] With confirmation: You can receive service message when you confirm it. ] Without confirmation: Your phone will receive service messages.
PAGE 183
Browser B rows e r Home Menu 6.1 Menu 6.3 You can launch the web browser and access the homepage of the web service provided by service provider. The phone can save the page on display as an offline file. Up to 20 pages can be saved. ] Go to URL You can also directly access to the Internet by pressing the left soft key [Internet] in idle mode. Bookmarks Menu 6.2 To store the frequently access or favourite URLs/Pages.
PAGE 184
] Certificates B rows e r If stored, a list of root/ca certificates required for WTLS/TLS can be found here. Certificates can be viewed from the list. Automatic, English(ASCII), English(ISO), English(LATIN), Unicode(UCS2 BE), Unicode(UCS2 LE), Unicode(UCS2 Auto), Unicode(UTF-16 BE), Unicode(UTF-16 LE), Unicode(UTF-16 Auto), Unicode(UTF-8). Session clear Secure (WTLS/ TLS) session data can be cleared using this option. Session data should be cleared to establish a new secure session. Settings Menu 6.
PAGE 185
Browser B rows e r Cache (Menu 6.6.5) Enabling Cache allows you to store accessed pages to your phone. Once a page has been stored in cache it will greatly enhance the page loading speed on subsequent browsing of the same page. Cookies (Menu 6.6.6) Enabling Cookies allows you to store cookies sent from the server. Disabling this function will prevent cookies from being stored on your phone. Clear cache (Menu 6.6.7) Deletes all web pages previously stored in cache. Clear cookie (Menu 6.6.
PAGE 186
Media album - Rename: You can rename the image. Menu 7.1 This consists of an embedded link for downloading images through the Internet, Default images, and My Images folders. The photos taken using the camera are stored in the Images folder and you can create new folders to manage them. You can also save selected files as animated Gifs and send multiple files to other people. - File info.: Shows information of the selected image file.
PAGE 187
Media album ] Media album ] Edit object: To use the Image Defect & Clipping functions. Press the right soft key to execute [Send] function immediately. ] Effect: To apply the desired effect to the image. ] Mirror: To reverse it as a mirror image (right>
PAGE 188
- Delete: Deletes the selected video. - File info.: Shows information of the selected video file. When option 1. Play is selected, the video clip will be played with the Media Player. To pause the playback, press the OK key during the playback. To resume the paused playback, press the OK key once again. ] Mark/Unmark: Using the Mark function, you can send, delete, move and copy multiple files. ] To capture the screen shot, press the right soft key when the playback is paused.
PAGE 189
Media album ] Media album ] Capture: You can save what is on the paused screen in an image file (activating only in the Pause mode). Mute/Unmute: If the Volume is set to more than 0, the Mute mode goes active and if the Volume is set to 0, the Unmute mode goes active. ] Set repeat: You can set the repeat option (None/Current file/All files). ] Player skin: You can select the desired player skin. ] Move to file ] Play: Plays the sound. ] New folder: You can create a new folder.
PAGE 190
1. Play/Pause: You can play, or pause playing a file. 9. Move to file ] Previous file: Plays the previous sound file. ] Next file: Plays the next video file. 2. Send: You can send a file via Picture message, Group message, Email or Bluetooth if not protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM). 0. Equalizer: You can select the desired equalizer or set an user defined equalizer. 3. Go to list: Goes back to the list. Applications 4.
PAGE 191
Media album Media album Although all types of files can be saved here, you can only copy or move files managed by My Media. To set a file as your wallpaper or ringtone, you must copy or move the file into the corresponding folder. For example, you can copy *.jpg files to My Pictures folder, *.mp3 files to My Sounds and *.3gp files to My Videos. You cannot copy or move files that are not managed by My Media. 6. If relevant, create with different pictures an animated GIF file.
PAGE 192
Play: Plays the selected audio/video file. ] Videos (Menu 7.7.2) Add new: You can add a new file from the audio/video list. ] Provides the same functions as those in the My Videos menu on your phone. Sort by: You can sort the files by name, date or file type. ] Memory status: You can view the memory status (handset or external memory card). Sounds (Menu 7.7.3) Media album ] To set a picture as your wallpaper, you must copy or move the picture to the phone.
PAGE 193
Games & Downloads G a m es & D ow n l o a d s This phone supports JavaTM so that you can download games, and play them on your handset. Note ] Please note that downloading a stuff(game, ringtone, wallpaper, etc.) usually requires additional charge. My games & apps Menu 8.1 This menu is used to locate and run downloaded applications, e.g. games. More games Menu 8.2 It connects to the game portal web page so that you can download games. Downloads Menu 8.
PAGE 194
More Menu 9.1 If you set the alarm, " " appears on the Indicator bar. The specified alarm sounds at the scheduled time. Press the [OK] key to stop the alarm, and the alarm is released. Press the the right soft key [Snooze] and choose the snooze interval. The alarm sound is stopped and resumed after selected Snooze duration. You can configure up to 5 alarms. 1. Select your desired alarm to configure in the alarm list. If there is no alarm, press the right soft key [Add] to add a new alarm. 2.
PAGE 195
More M o re Note ] We recommend that your phone and the Bluetooth device you are communicating with be within a range of 10 meters. The connection may be improved if there are no solid objects in between your phone and the other Bluetooth device. 1. Getting started • Menu > 9. More > 2. Connectivity > 1. Bluetooth > 1. Paired devices - My handset’s name: You can name or rename your phone as it will appear on other devices.
PAGE 196
1. Add new: Using this menu, you can pair a new Bluetooth device with your phone. ] Pairing procedure 2. Assign short name: Using this menu, you can rename a paired phone as required. - Press the Bond key. A window will appear on the screen asking you to enter your password. 3. Connecting/Disconnecting the device - After creating a password (of 1 to 16 digits), the user of the other device must enter the password for pairing.
PAGE 197
More M o re 1. To transmit data from your phone to another Bluetooth device, first select the application where the target data is saved. For example, to send data in the Media album to another device, select • Menu > 7. Media album > 1. Images /2. Videos / 3. Sounds > Select data to transmit > Send > 4. Bluetooth Menu > 9. More > 2. Connectivity > 1. Bluetooth > 1. Paired devices 2.
PAGE 198
4. To check that the selected headset has been connected successfully, press the Option key. If it is properly connected, 3.Disconnect will appear. If it is not connected, 3.Connect will appear. Server synchronisation (Menu 9.2.2) If Sync service is supported by your network operator, this service function synchronizes the data in a phone and the data on a server such as Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks via a wireless network. Connect 1.
PAGE 199
More ] M o re Proxy IP address: Enter the WAP gateway address and port number. ] User name: Enter your user ID for synchronization server. ] Password: Input your password. ] Contacts: Select whether to synchronise Contacts or not. ] Contact name: Input the contacts database name for server access. ] Calendar: Select whether to synchronise Calendar or not. ] Calendar name: Input the calendar database name for server access. ] Tasks: Select whether to synchronise Tasks or not.
PAGE 200
Menu 9.3 World time Menu 9.4 You have a calculator that provides 4 calculations of addition, subtraction, multiplication and division as well as scientific functions. The World time function provides time information of major cities worldwide. 1. Press [Func]. 2. You can view the time of desired country or city using the left and right key. 2. Select appropriate function. 3. Select OK. You can input numbers using the number keys, and operators using the up, down, left, and right direction key.
PAGE 201
More M o re 3. Input currency rates for up to 5 currencies equivalent to GBP and then press [Done]. Then you can convert one currency to another. 4. Select the desired units to convert and convert to using the OK key [List]. 5. Input numbers. Conversion is automatically calculated. 6. Press [Reset] to clear the current input Field. Surface (Menu 9.5.2) Weight (Menu 9.5.4) 1. Select Weight menu. 2. Select desired unit to convert using [Unit]. 3. Input standard unit and view converted value. 4.
PAGE 202
1. Select Volume menu. M o re Volume (Menu 9.5.6) 2. Select desired unit to convert using [Unit]. 3. Input standard unit and view converted value. 4. Press [Reset] to clear the current input field and locate the cursor in the input field. Velocity (Menu 9.5.7) 1. Select Velocity menu. 2. Select desired unit to convert using [Unit]. 3. Input standard unit and view converted value. 4. Press [Reset] to clear the current input field and locate the cursor in the input field.
PAGE 203
Display D i s p l ay This menu allows you to personalise the display options of the screens and of the menus' entire graphic interface. Switch on (Menu *.1.3) Screen theme Switch off (Menu *.1.4) Menu *.1 You can set the screen theme to be displayed on the main screen. You can select the image to be displayed while the phone is being switched off. Home screen (Menu *.1.1) Front screen theme ] Wallpaper: You can select an image to set up as a background.
PAGE 204
You can select the image to be displayed while dialling a number. Backlight D i s p l ay Outgoing call (Menu *.2.2) Menu *.3 You can set the backlight duration on the Main screen, Front screen and Keypad each. Font Menu *.4 You can set the font style, dialing font size, and dialing font color using the left/right navigation keys. Handset scheme Menu *.5 Select the desired handset scheme between Orange and Metal. Download more Menu *.6 Connects to the Internet.
PAGE 205
Profiles D i s p l ay The profiles menu allows you to personalise and set call tones, message tones, and videophone event tones. The General and Loud profiles are preset by the manufacturer, but may be personalized. ] Alert by: You can personalize the type of signal made by the Videophone, choosing between Ring, Vibration, Silent, Ring & Vibration, Ring after vibration and Max Ring & Vibration.
PAGE 206
Key tone Volume: You can set the volume of the chosen effect, choosing from 7 available levels. ] Flip tone: You can select one of the available files, to be played by the videophone when flipped open. ] Confirmation tone: You can set the confirmation tone to be played by the videophone to confirm actions. ] Switch on sound: You can set the effect to be played when the videophone is switched on. ] Switch on file: You can select which file will be played when the videophone is switched on.
PAGE 207
Calendar Calendar Calendar Menu #.1 Schedule inquiry and search 1. Reference by Months You can refer to your schedule by months. The cursor is on the current date, and the registered date is underlined. The schedule saved for the date where the cursor is located is represented by an icon. Pressing the shortcut key 1 moves to the previous year and pressing key 3 move to the next year and pressing key 5 moves to today. Pressing key 7 moves to the previous month, and key 9 moves to the next month.
PAGE 208
Configurable alarm options Icon does not exist. On time 15 mins before 30 mins before 1 hour before 1 day before 3 days before 1 week before Schedule notification If the user has configured the alarm setting, the specified alarm sound will ring. If the notification time is before the schedule start time, you can set up the alarm again. To do Menu #.2 You can view, edit and add jobs to do. Jobs to do are displayed in time order. The jobs already finished and unfinished are displayed in different ways.
PAGE 209
Calendar Calendar Set job status Edit and delete memo The jobs set as finished are displayed as cross-out below the unfinished jobs in the To do list. You can set Finished jobs to Not finished by selecting 'Option'. Select 'Send via' from the 'Option' to send the selected jobs through Text message, Multimedia message, Group message, Email or Bluetooth. Locate the cursor on your desired memo, and press the key to view all the contents of the memo. This function shows all the memo contents.
PAGE 210
Menu #.6 Memory info. (Menu #.7.2) 1. Press [Add] and input desired date in the date field. Allows you to view each memory status of the Calendar menu. 2. Input text in [Notes] field and press [Done]. Clear all (Menu #.7.3) 3. To view detailed job contents, locate the cursor on the desired item in the Date counter List and press the OK key. Details of the selected item With day on which the event occurs is displayed in View detail page.
PAGE 211
Troubleshooting Tro u b l es h o ot i n g Please check to see if any problem which you may have with your phone is described here before taking it for service or calling a service engineer. Q How do I view the list of outgoing calls, incoming calls and missed calls? A Press areas. A In certain areas, signal strength can vary . Q How do I clear all call history? A Press the MENU key and then Q Connection is poor or is not audible in certain - - - Options - Delete all.
PAGE 212
Q An echo can be heard during connection with a A It is called ‘Echo Phenomenon’. It occurs if the volume is too high or caused by special properties (semi electronic telephone exchange) of the machine on the other end. Q Usage time of battery becomes shorter. A If the battery time is short, it may be due to the user environment, or large volume of calls, or weak signals. Q No number is dialled when you recall a phonebook entry. Q The phone gets warm.
PAGE 213
Accessories Ac c es s o r i es There are a variety of accessories available for your mobile phone. You can select these according to your personal communication requirements. Consult your local dealer for availability. AC Adapter (supplied in basic kit) Data Kit (supplied in basic kit) This adapter lets you charge the mobile phone while at home or in the office. The Data Kit consists in a USB Data Cable and a CD-ROM, it allows you to connect your phone to a PC.
PAGE 214
PAGE 215
MEMO
PAGE 216
MEMO
PAGE 217
MEMO